1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1601–1640 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Green metal garage with two open bays sheltering an RV and boat, steel structure in mountains

18×36 RV Cover with Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 RV Cover with Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36RV Cover with Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners who park a Class C motorhome or fifth-wheel under 35 feet use the 18×36 vertical roof metal building as a tall, narrow shelter. The 18-ft width clears slide-outs, and the 36-ft length covers tongue and bumper.

You’re viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12’+ Leg Height
  • Open Sides Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 rv cover with storage.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. RV owners who park a Class C motorhome or fifth-wheel under 35 feet use the 18×36 vertical roof metal building as a tall, narrow shelter.

RV BAYDaily Driver18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · tall walls

RV Cover with Storage layout.

RV owners who park a Class C motorhome or fifth-wheel under 35 feet use the 18×36 vertical roof metal building as a tall, narrow shelter. The 18-ft width clears slide-outs, and the 36-ft length covers tongue and bumper with margin for a deep-cycle battery cabinet.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Storage works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with storage
Everyday rv cover with storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with storage + seasonal storage
rv cover with storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 RV Cover with Storage, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 RV Cover with Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 rv cover with storage cost?

A 18×36 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 rv cover with storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 rv cover with storage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 rv cover with storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 rv cover with storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 rv cover with storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 rv cover with storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 rv cover with storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×36 rv cover with storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal garage with two open bays sheltering an RV and boat, steel structure in mountains

18×36 RV Cover with Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Light gray metal workshop with clerestory windows, navy accents, and a white work van outside

18×36 Detached Workshop

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Detached Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Detached Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Detached Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Detached Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×36 detached workshop? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Tradespeople ordering a 18×36 metal workshop want a fully enclosed shop with a personnel.

You’re viewing:Detached Workshop·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-DETACHED-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 detached workshop.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 18×36 detached workshop? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft

Detached Workshop layout.

Looking for a 18×36 detached workshop? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Tradespeople ordering a 18×36 metal workshop want a fully enclosed shop with a personnel door, two windows for natural light, and a 18×36 roll-up for moving lumber or equipment in. Insulated walls and a 4:12 pitch keep the space usable year-round. 648 sq ft handles a table saw, router table, and assembly bench without crowding.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Workshop works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Detached Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Workshop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday detached workshop
Everyday detached workshop
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached workshop + seasonal storage
detached workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Detached Workshop, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 detached workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Detached Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Detached Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Workshop also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 detached workshop cost?

A 18×36 detached workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 detached workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 detached workshop?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 detached workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 detached workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 detached workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 detached workshop.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 detached workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 detached workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 detached workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 detached workshop typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Light gray metal workshop with clerestory windows, navy accents, and a white work van outside

18×36 Detached Workshop

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage at sunset with open bay door, pickup truck, and dump trailer outside

18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,200

12

18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,650$10,200SAVE $1,450
or $213/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Hobby Farm Utility Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 18×36 hobby farm utility building fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Two sliding barn doors at each gable let a tractor drive through.

You’re viewing:Hobby Farm Utility Building·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$10,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Drive-Through
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-HOBBY-FARM-UTILIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 hobby farm utility building.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 hobby farm utility building fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑18′ × 36′ · 648 ground + loft

Hobby Farm Utility Building layout.

Our 18×36 hobby farm utility building fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Two sliding barn doors at each gable let a tractor drive through end-to-end. Side wall lean-tos can be added later for hay storage or a covered wash rack.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Utility Building works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Utility Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Utility Building spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Utility Building.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm utility building
Everyday hobby farm utility building
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm utility building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm utility building + seasonal storage
hobby farm utility building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 hobby farm utility building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Utility Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Utility Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Utility Building also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Utility Building questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 hobby farm utility building cost?

A 18×36 hobby farm utility building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 hobby farm utility building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm utility building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 hobby farm utility building?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm utility building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 hobby farm utility building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 hobby farm utility building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 hobby farm utility building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 hobby farm utility building.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 hobby farm utility building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 hobby farm utility building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×36 hobby farm utility building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Utility Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage at sunset with open bay door, pickup truck, and dump trailer outside

18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white crossbuck double doors and galvanized roof at sunset on a farm

18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Truck and Trailer Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage, built for daily backyard use.

18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of everyday truck and trailer garage space. Buyers with a full-size F-250 plus an open utility trailer use the 18×36 as a tandem garage. The 35-foot length parks the truck and a 16-foot trailer.

You’re viewing:Truck and Trailer Garage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • Tandem Park
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-TRUCK-TRAILER-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 truck and trailer garage.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. 18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of everyday truck and trailer garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft

Truck and Trailer Garage layout.

18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of everyday truck and trailer garage space. Buyers with a full-size F-250 plus an open utility trailer use the 18×36 as a tandem garage. The 35-foot length parks the truck and a 16-foot trailer end-to-end with room for the tongue jack. 18 feet of width gives you 3 feet of walk-around clearance on each side of a 6.5-foot-wide pickup.

💡 Pro tip:Truck and Trailer Garage works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Trailer Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Trailer Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Trailer Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and trailer garage
Everyday truck and trailer garage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and trailer garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and trailer garage + seasonal storage
truck and trailer garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 truck and trailer garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Trailer Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Trailer Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Trailer Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Trailer Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 truck and trailer garage cost?

A 18×36 truck and trailer garage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 truck and trailer garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck and trailer garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 truck and trailer garage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and trailer garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 truck and trailer garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 truck and trailer garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 truck and trailer garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 truck and trailer garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 truck and trailer garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 truck and trailer garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 truck and trailer garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 truck and trailer garage typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Trailer Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white crossbuck double doors and galvanized roof at sunset on a farm

18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal barn with double barn doors, covered porch and brown wainscot on open farmland

18×36 Man Cave / She Shed

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Man Cave / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners convert the 648 sq ft into a finished hangout, insulated walls, three storefront windows, French doors, and a wainscoted exterior that reads more cottage than shed. Big enough for a lounge, a bar, and a.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 man cave / she shed.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Homeowners convert the 648 sq ft into a finished hangout, insulated walls, three storefront windows, French doors, and a wainscoted exterior that reads more cottage than shed.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑18′ × 36′ · 648 ground + loft

Man Cave / She Shed layout.

Homeowners convert the 648 sq ft into a finished hangout, insulated walls, three storefront windows, French doors, and a wainscoted exterior that reads more cottage than shed. Big enough for a lounge, a bar, and a media wall without feeling like a garage.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 man cave / she shed cost?

A 18×36 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 man cave / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×36 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal barn with double barn doors, covered porch and brown wainscot on open farmland

18×36 Man Cave / She Shed

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open equipment bay and black wainscot in fall countryside

18×36 Contractor Storage Shop

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Contractor Storage Shop | Steel and Stud, From $11,400

12

18×36 Contractor Storage Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Contractor Storage Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Contractor Storage Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of code-compliant contractor storage shop space. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors order the 18×36 prefab metal building as a service-truck home base with locking storage. A 18×36.

You’re viewing:Contractor Storage Shop·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Keypad Entry
  • Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 contractor storage shop.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. 18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of code-compliant contractor storage shop space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft

Contractor Storage Shop layout.

18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of code-compliant contractor storage shop space. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors order the 18×36 prefab metal building as a service-truck home base with locking storage. A 18×36 roll-up clears a box truck or a van with a roof rack. Side wall framed openings let you add a roof-mounted condenser or a future office partition.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Storage Shop works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Contractor Storage Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage Shop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage shop
Everyday contractor storage shop
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage shop + seasonal storage
contractor storage shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Contractor Storage Shop, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 contractor storage shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Contractor Storage Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Contractor Storage Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage Shop also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 contractor storage shop cost?

A 18×36 contractor storage shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 contractor storage shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor storage shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 contractor storage shop?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 contractor storage shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 contractor storage shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 contractor storage shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 contractor storage shop.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 contractor storage shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 contractor storage shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×36 contractor storage shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open equipment bay and black wainscot in fall countryside

18×36 Contractor Storage Shop

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue steel barn with white sliding doors, cupola, and horse grazing in the pasture at sunset

18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,200

12

18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,650$10,200SAVE $1,450
or $213/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Horse Stall and Tack Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×36 horse stall and tack building packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners with two horses use the 18×36 as a two-stall barn with a tack room. The.

You’re viewing:Horse Stall and Tack Building·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$10,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • Stall Partitions
  • Dutch Door
  • Sliding Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-HORSE-STALL-TACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 horse stall and tack building.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×36 horse stall and tack building packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft

Horse Stall and Tack Building layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×36 horse stall and tack building packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners with two horses use the 18×36 as a two-stall barn with a tack room. The 35-foot length divides cleanly into two 18×36 stalls plus an 18×36 tack and feed area. Sliding barn doors at the gable plus a Dutch door on the side give you flexible access.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Stall and Tack Building works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Stall and Tack Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Stall and Tack Building spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Stall and Tack Building.

DAILY USEEveryday horse stall and tack building
Everyday horse stall and tack building
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse stall and tack building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse stall and tack building + seasonal storage
horse stall and tack building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 horse stall and tack building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Stall and Tack Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Stall and Tack Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Stall and Tack Building also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Stall and Tack Building questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 horse stall and tack building cost?

A 18×36 horse stall and tack building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 horse stall and tack building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse stall and tack building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 horse stall and tack building?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse stall and tack building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 horse stall and tack building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 horse stall and tack building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 horse stall and tack building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 horse stall and tack building.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 horse stall and tack building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 horse stall and tack building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×36 horse stall and tack building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Stall and Tack Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue steel barn with white sliding doors, cupola, and horse grazing in the pasture at sunset

18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Beige metal carport with enclosed sides sheltering a pickup truck by an autumn lake

18×36 Carport with Storage Room

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Carport with Storage Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Carport with Storage Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Carport with Storage Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Carport with Storage Room, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 carport with storage room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A common 18×36 metal carport with storage layout dedicates the front 20 feet as open.

You’re viewing:Carport with Storage Room·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Walk-In Door
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-CARPORT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 carport with storage room.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 carport with storage room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft

Carport with Storage Room layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 carport with storage room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A common 18×36 metal carport with storage layout dedicates the front 20 feet as open carport for two vehicles parked tandem, and walls in the rear 15 feet as a lockable 270-sq-ft storage room. Mowers, kayaks, and garden tools live behind a 36-inch walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Carport with Storage Room works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Carport with Storage Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport with Storage Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport with Storage Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport with Storage Room.

DAILY USEEveryday carport with storage room
Everyday carport with storage room
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport with storage room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport with storage room + seasonal storage
carport with storage room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Carport with Storage Room, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 carport with storage room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport with Storage Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Carport with Storage Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Carport with Storage Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport with Storage Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport with Storage Room also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport with Storage Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 carport with storage room cost?

A 18×36 carport with storage room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 carport with storage room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport with storage room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 carport with storage room?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport with storage room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 carport with storage room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 carport with storage room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 carport with storage room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 carport with storage room.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 carport with storage room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 carport with storage room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 carport with storage room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 carport with storage room typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport with Storage Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Beige metal carport with enclosed sides sheltering a pickup truck by an autumn lake

18×36 Carport with Storage Room

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building fabrication shop with welder inside, forklift, and stacked steel beams outside

18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop | Steel and Stud, From $11,400

12

18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Fabrication & Welding Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×36 fabrication & welding shop fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Welders and small-batch metal fabricators order an 18×36 steel building as their.

You’re viewing:Fabrication & Welding Shop·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 100A NEC Ready
  • Vent Cutouts
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-FABRICATION-WELDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 fabrication & welding shop.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 fabrication & welding shop fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft

Fabrication & Welding Shop layout.

Our 18×36 fabrication & welding shop fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Welders and small-batch metal fabricators order an 18×36 steel building as their first commercial bay. 648 sq ft holds a welding table, a vertical metal storage rack, a grinder and chop-saw station, and a finishing area for paint and powder prep. Spec a 100-amp subpanel with National Electrical Code (NEC) rough-in framing, ventilation cutouts for fume extraction, and a 12-gauge frame to hang an overhead jib or hoist.

💡 Pro tip:Fabrication & Welding Shop works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication & Welding Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication & Welding Shop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication & Welding Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication & welding shop
Everyday fabrication & welding shop
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication & welding shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication & welding shop + seasonal storage
fabrication & welding shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 fabrication & welding shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication & Welding Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication & Welding Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication & Welding Shop also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication & Welding Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop cost?

A 18×36 fabrication & welding shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication & welding shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication & welding shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication & Welding Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building fabrication shop with welder inside, forklift, and stacked steel beams outside

18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with open front sheltering a black truck on a valley farm

18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,200

12

18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,650$10,200SAVE $1,450
or $213/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Equipment Lean-To Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 18×36 equipment lean-to shed fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers use the open or partially enclosed 18×36 as a lean-to-style.

You’re viewing:Equipment Lean-To Shed·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$10,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • 12′ Legs
  • A-Frame Horizontal
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-EQUIPMENT-LEAN-TBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 equipment lean-to shed.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 equipment lean-to shed fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft shop

Equipment Lean-To Shed layout.

Our 18×36 equipment lean-to shed fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers use the open or partially enclosed 18×36 as a lean-to-style equipment shed for a sub-compact tractor, a zero-turn mower, brush hog, and a UTV. 12-foot legs clear a ROPS bar with the cage up. The 35-foot run lines all four pieces of equipment up side-by-side under cover.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment Lean-To Shed works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Lean-To Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Lean-To Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Lean-To Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment lean-to shed
Everyday equipment lean-to shed
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment lean-to shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment lean-to shed + seasonal storage
equipment lean-to shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 equipment lean-to shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Lean-To Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Lean-To Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Lean-To Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🎯 18×36

Boat and Toy Storage

18×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Lean-To Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed cost?

A 18×36 equipment lean-to shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment lean-to shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment lean-to shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Lean-To Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with open front sheltering a black truck on a valley farm

18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building with brown trim, open roll-up bay and bass boat on trailer

18×36 Boat and Toy Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of hobby-ready boat and toy storage space. RV owners and boat owners pick the 18×36 enclosed metal building to keep a 24-foot center console with trailer plus jet skis, kayaks, and outboard gear.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • Insulated
  • Coastal Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 boat and toy storage.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. 18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of hobby-ready boat and toy storage space.

RV BAYDaily Driver18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · tall walls

Boat and Toy Storage layout.

18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of hobby-ready boat and toy storage space. RV owners and boat owners pick the 18×36 enclosed metal building to keep a 24-foot center console with trailer plus jet skis, kayaks, and outboard gear out of the weather. A 18×36 roll-up door clears a tower-equipped bowrider. Insulated walls protect electronics through winter.

💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×36 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×36

RV Cover with Storage

18×36 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×36

Detached Workshop

18×36 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×36

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×36 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×36

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×36 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×36

Man Cave / She Shed

18×36 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Storage Shop

18×36 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×36

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×36 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×36

Carport with Storage Room

18×36 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×36

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×36 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×36

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×36 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 boat and toy storage cost?

A 18×36 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×36 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building with brown trim, open roll-up bay and bass boat on trailer

18×36 Boat and Toy Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Caramel metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot beside a forest pond

18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40One Car Garage with Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Homeowners use this depth to park one full-size truck up front and dedicate the.

You’re viewing:One Car Garage with Workshop·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×36
smaller
$9,550
18×40
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 36″ Walk-In
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-ONE-CAR-GARAGE-WBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 one car garage with workshop.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

One Car Garage with Workshop layout.

Looking for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Homeowners use this depth to park one full-size truck up front and dedicate the back 20 feet to a workbench, tool wall, and standing toolbox. The 16-foot width gives you 3-4 feet of side clearance beside an F-150, enough to walk past with a project in hand.

💡 Pro tip:One Car Garage with Workshop works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your One Car Garage with Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

One Car Garage with Workshop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use One Car Garage with Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday one car garage with workshop
Everyday one car garage with workshop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one car garage with workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWone car garage with workshop + seasonal storage
one car garage with workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 one car garage with workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from One Car Garage with Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your One Car Garage with Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose One Car Garage with Workshop also viewed:

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

One Car Garage with Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 one car garage with workshop cost?

A 18×40 one car garage with workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 one car garage with workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud one car garage with workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud one car garage with workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 one car garage with workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 one car garage with workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 one car garage with workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 one car garage with workshop.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 one car garage with workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 one car garage with workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×40 one car garage with workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×40 one car garage with workshop typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your One Car Garage with Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Caramel metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot beside a forest pond

18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with stone wainscot, black roll-up door and steel building trim near mountains

18×40 Metal Workshop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Metal Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 Metal Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Metal Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Metal Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×40 metal workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fits a table saw, drill press, miter station, and lumber rack with aisle clearance. Add R-19.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-METAL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 metal workshop.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 metal workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Metal Workshop layout.

Looking for a 18×40 metal workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fits a table saw, drill press, miter station, and lumber rack with aisle clearance. Add R-19 insulation and you’ve got a year-round conditioned shop.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Metal Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop
Everyday metal workshop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop + seasonal storage
metal workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Metal Workshop, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 metal workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Metal Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Metal Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 metal workshop cost?

A 18×40 metal workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 metal workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 metal workshop?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 metal workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 metal workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 metal workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 metal workshop.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 metal workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 metal workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×40 metal workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×40 metal workshop typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with stone wainscot, black roll-up door and steel building trim near mountains

18×40 Metal Workshop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit with single slope roof, lean-to canopy and black roll-up door

18×40 Metal Carport

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Metal Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Metal Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 metal carport packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open-sided 18×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • 12′ Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 metal carport.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 metal carport packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Metal Carport layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 metal carport packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open-sided 18×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit. Ground-anchored, no slab required for most counties.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Metal Carport, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 metal carport cost?

A 18×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 metal carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×40 metal carport for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a metal carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit with single slope roof, lean-to canopy and black roll-up door

18×40 Metal Carport

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray rv metal cover and enclosed steel garage sheltering a motorhome near a snowy mountain lake

18×40 RV Cover with Storage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 RV Cover with Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40RV Cover with Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 18×40 rv cover with storage? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. RV owners who want enclosure on three sides spec a 18×40 with one open end for drive-through.

You’re viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×36
smaller
$9,550
18×40
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 rv cover with storage.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 rv cover with storage? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

RV BAYDaily Driver18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft · tall walls

RV Cover with Storage layout.

Looking for a 18×40 rv cover with storage? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. RV owners who want enclosure on three sides spec a 18×40 with one open end for drive-through access. The 14-foot leg clears a fifth-wheel, and the back end becomes locked storage for batteries, hoses, and chocks. Wind-rated to 140 MPH for coastal storage.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Storage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with storage
Everyday rv cover with storage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with storage + seasonal storage
rv cover with storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 RV Cover with Storage, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 RV Cover with Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 rv cover with storage cost?

A 18×40 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 rv cover with storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 rv cover with storage?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 rv cover with storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 rv cover with storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 rv cover with storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 rv cover with storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 rv cover with storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×40 rv cover with storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray rv metal cover and enclosed steel garage sheltering a motorhome near a snowy mountain lake

18×40 RV Cover with Storage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal building kit woodshop with roll-up door, pickup truck, and stacked lumber outside

18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Horse Tack & Feed Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 18×40 horse tack & feed barn fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers run a 18×40 as a two-stall barn plus a tack/feed room: 18×40.

You’re viewing:Horse Tack & Feed Barn·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 29-GA Standard
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-HORSE-TACK-FEED-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 horse tack & feed barn.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 18×40 horse tack & feed barn fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Horse Tack & Feed Barn layout.

Our 18×40 horse tack & feed barn fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers run a 18×40 as a two-stall barn plus a tack/feed room: 18×40 stalls on one end, 18×40 storage on the other, breezeway in the middle. Sliding barn doors on both gable ends, walk-in to the tack room. Galvanized framing handles ammonia exposure.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Tack & Feed Barn works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Tack & Feed Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Tack & Feed Barn spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Tack & Feed Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday horse tack & feed barn
Everyday horse tack & feed barn
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse tack & feed barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse tack & feed barn + seasonal storage
horse tack & feed barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 horse tack & feed barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Tack & Feed Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Tack & Feed Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Tack & Feed Barn also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Tack & Feed Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn cost?

A 18×40 horse tack & feed barn from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse tack & feed barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse tack & feed barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Tack & Feed Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal building kit woodshop with roll-up door, pickup truck, and stacked lumber outside

18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with double roll-up doors open to tool benches and pegboards

18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Equipment & Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×40 equipment & implement storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners store a compact tractor, brush hog, disc, and round baler under one 18×40.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Implement Storage·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Clearance
  • Open Gable
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-EQUIPMENT-IMPLEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 equipment & implement storage.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×40 equipment & implement storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft shop

Equipment & Implement Storage layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×40 equipment & implement storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners store a compact tractor, brush hog, disc, and round baler under one 18×40 roof. The 14-foot legs clear a tractor with a loader raised, and the 40-foot length lines up implements without unhooking. Open one end for drive-through.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Implement Storage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & implement storage
Everyday equipment & implement storage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & implement storage + seasonal storage
equipment & implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 equipment & implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 equipment & implement storage cost?

A 18×40 equipment & implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 equipment & implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 equipment & implement storage?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 equipment & implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 equipment & implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 equipment & implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 18×40 equipment & implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 equipment & implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 equipment & implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×40 equipment & implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with double roll-up doors open to tool benches and pegboards

18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel building with cupola, covered porch and garage bay beside a mountain lake

18×40 Detached Garage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×40 detached garage fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. A 18×40 detached garage holds one car plus a small boat, two motorcycles plus a.

You’re viewing:Detached Garage·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Boxed Eave
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-DETACHED-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 detached garage.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 18×40 detached garage fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Detached Garage layout.

Our 18×40 detached garage fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. A 18×40 detached garage holds one car plus a small boat, two motorcycles plus a workbench, or a single bay with a 20-foot storage room behind a partition wall. Wainscoting and a Barn Red roof gives it residential curb appeal that satisfies most HOAs.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Garage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday detached garage
Everyday detached garage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached garage + seasonal storage
detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Detached Garage, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 detached garage cost?

A 18×40 detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 detached garage?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×40 detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×40 detached garage typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel building with cupola, covered porch and garage bay beside a mountain lake

18×40 Detached Garage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown steel structure cabin with covered porch and rocking chairs in a snowy pine forest

18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Hunting Cabin Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 hunting cabin shell packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Buyers turning a 18×40 prefab building into a hunting cabin spec four walls, two windows, a.

You’re viewing:Hunting Cabin Shell·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 4 Walls
  • 2 Windows
  • R-13 Vapor
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-HUNTING-CABIN-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 hunting cabin shell.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 hunting cabin shell packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑18′ × 40′ · 720 ground + loft

Hunting Cabin Shell layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 hunting cabin shell packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Buyers turning a 18×40 prefab building into a hunting cabin spec four walls, two windows, a 36-inch walk-in, and skip the roll-up. The shell becomes a 720 sq ft cabin floor (bunkroom, kitchen, bath, and gear room) once interior framing goes in.

💡 Pro tip:Hunting Cabin Shell works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hunting Cabin Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hunting Cabin Shell spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hunting Cabin Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday hunting cabin shell
Everyday hunting cabin shell
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hunting cabin shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
hunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 hunting cabin shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hunting Cabin Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hunting Cabin Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hunting Cabin Shell also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hunting Cabin Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 hunting cabin shell cost?

A 18×40 hunting cabin shell from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 hunting cabin shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 hunting cabin shell?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 hunting cabin shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 hunting cabin shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 hunting cabin shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 hunting cabin shell.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 hunting cabin shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 hunting cabin shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×40 hunting cabin shell for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hunting cabin shell to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hunting Cabin Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown steel structure cabin with covered porch and rocking chairs in a snowy pine forest

18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Lakeside prefab metal building in green with red roof, gear storage, and jet ski shelter

18×40 Small Commercial Storage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Small Commercial Storage | Steel and Stud, From $12,500

12

18×40 Small Commercial Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750
or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Small Commercial Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Small Commercial Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×40 small commercial storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and landscapers buy a 18×40 steel building as locked job-site.

You’re viewing:Small Commercial Storage·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$12,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Certified
  • Keypad Lock
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-SMALL-COMMERCIALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 small commercial storage.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×40 small commercial storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Small Commercial Storage layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×40 small commercial storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and landscapers buy a 18×40 steel building as locked job-site storage for trailers, mowers, and pallet inventory. The 16-foot width lets a 12-foot enclosed trailer roll in past a 18×40 roll-up, and certified engineering meets commercial county code.

💡 Pro tip:Small Commercial Storage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Small Commercial Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Commercial Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Commercial Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Commercial Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small commercial storage
Everyday small commercial storage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small commercial storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall commercial storage + seasonal storage
small commercial storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Small Commercial Storage, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 small commercial storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Commercial Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Small Commercial Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Small Commercial Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Commercial Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Commercial Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Commercial Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 small commercial storage cost?

A 18×40 small commercial storage from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 small commercial storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small commercial storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 small commercial storage?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small commercial storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 small commercial storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 small commercial storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 small commercial storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 18×40 small commercial storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 small commercial storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 small commercial storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×40 small commercial storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Commercial Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Lakeside prefab metal building in green with red roof, gear storage, and jet ski shelter

18×40 Small Commercial Storage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper toned steel barn with sliding X-brace door under a sunset sky, prefab metal building style

18×40 Man Cave / She Shed

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

18×40 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Man Cave / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×40 man cave / she shed packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners convert a 18×40 building kit into a 720 sq ft hangout: pool table on one end, bar.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×36
smaller
$9,550
18×40
this size
$10,650
22×40
wider
$13,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • R-19 Batt
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 man cave / she shed.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×40 man cave / she shed packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑18′ × 40′ · 720 ground + loft

Man Cave / She Shed layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×40 man cave / she shed packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners convert a 18×40 building kit into a 720 sq ft hangout: pool table on one end, bar and lounge on the other, French doors out to the patio. R-19 batt and a mini-split make it four-season. Two-tone wainscoting reads as residential, not industrial.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 man cave / she shed cost?

A 18×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 man cave / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×40 man cave / she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×40 man cave / she shed typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper toned steel barn with sliding X-brace door under a sunset sky, prefab metal building style

18×40 Man Cave / She Shed

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Chocolate brown metal garage with hip roof, sedan and detailing shelves visible inside

18×40 Mechanic’s Shop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Mechanic’s Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,500

12

18×40 Mechanic’s Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750
or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Mechanic’s Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Mechanic’s Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Side-business mechanics need 12-foot legs minimum to clear a two-post lift with a truck on it. The.

You’re viewing:Mechanic’s Shop·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$12,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Lift-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-MECHANIC-S-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 mechanic’s shop.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Mechanic’s Shop layout.

Looking for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Side-business mechanics need 12-foot legs minimum to clear a two-post lift with a truck on it. The 18×40 fits one lift, a tool chest wall, and a parts shelf. 12-gauge framing handles the lift’s anchor loads, and a concrete slab is mandatory at this height.

💡 Pro tip:Mechanic’s Shop works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Mechanic’s Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mechanic’s Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanic’s Shop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mechanic’s Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday mechanic's shop
Everyday mechanic’s shop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mechanic’s shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmechanic's shop + seasonal storage
mechanic’s shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Mechanic’s Shop, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 mechanic’s shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mechanic’s Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Mechanic’s Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Mechanic’s Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mechanic’s Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mechanic’s Shop also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🌾 18×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

18×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mechanic’s Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 mechanic’s shop cost?

A 18×40 mechanic’s shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 mechanic’s shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mechanic’s shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mechanic’s shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 mechanic’s shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 mechanic’s shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 mechanic’s shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 18×40 mechanic’s shop.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 mechanic’s shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 mechanic’s shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×40 mechanic’s shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mechanic’s Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Chocolate brown metal garage with hip roof, sedan and detailing shelves visible inside

18×40 Mechanic’s Shop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building interior with wood trusses storing a tractor, baler, and farm machinery

18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×40Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×40 delivers 720 sq ft of rugged hay & feed lean-to base space. Hobby farmers spec a 18×40 enclosed core with a 18×40 lean-to off one side, total covered footprint hits 1,720 sq ft. Hay bales stack inside dry, while.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Lean-To Base·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×40
18×40
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Lean-To
  • 1,120 SF Covered
  • Galvalume Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-HAY-FEED-LEAN-TOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base.

18 feet wide × 40 feet long. 18×40 delivers 720 sq ft of rugged hay & feed lean-to base space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 40′ · 720 sq ft

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base layout.

18×40 delivers 720 sq ft of rugged hay & feed lean-to base space. Hobby farmers spec a 18×40 enclosed core with a 18×40 lean-to off one side, total covered footprint hits 1,720 sq ft. Hay bales stack inside dry, while tractor and loader park under the lean-to. Single sloped roof on the lean-to sheds rain away from the main roll-up.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Lean-To Base works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Lean-To Base.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base spec sheet.

Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Lean-To Base.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed lean-to base
Everyday hay & feed lean-to base
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed lean-to base.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed lean-to base + seasonal storage
hay & feed lean-to base + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×40?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Lean-To Base shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Lean-To Base · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Lean-To Base also viewed:

🏡 18×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

18×40 one car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →

🏡 18×40

Metal Workshop

18×40 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🎯 18×40

Metal Carport

18×40 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 18×40

RV Cover with Storage

18×40 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 18×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

18×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →

🌾 18×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

18×40 equipment & implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →

🏡 18×40

Detached Garage

18×40 detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage →

🎯 18×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

18×40 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏢 18×40

Small Commercial Storage

18×40 small commercial storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Commercial Storage →

🏡 18×40

Man Cave / She Shed

18×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×40

Mechanic’s Shop

18×40 mechanic’s shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mechanic’s Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base questions, answered.

How much does a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base cost?

A 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed lean-to base ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed lean-to base different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base.

What warranty comes with the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Lean-To Base quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building interior with wood trusses storing a tractor, baler, and farm machinery

18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream prefab metal building with blue roof, blue wainscot and garage door in a lakeside yard

20×20 One-Car Garage

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 One-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 One-Car Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20One-Car Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 One-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday one-car garage space. Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening.

You’re viewing:One-Car Garage·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-ONE-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 one-car garage.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. 20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday one-car garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

One-Car Garage layout.

20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday one-car garage space. Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors. The extra 2 ft over a 16-wide gives you a real walk-around. Adds resale value and code-compliant covered parking.

💡 Pro tip:One-Car Garage works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 One-Car Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your One-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

One-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use One-Car Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday one-car garage
Everyday one-car garage
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWone-car garage + seasonal storage
one-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 One-Car Garage, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 one-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from One-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 One-Car Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 One-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your One-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose One-Car Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

One-Car Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 one-car garage cost?

A 20×20 one-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 one-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud one-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 one-car garage?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud one-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 one-car garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 one-car garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 one-car garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 one-car garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 one-car garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 one-car garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 one-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 one-car garage typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your One-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream prefab metal building with blue roof, blue wainscot and garage door in a lakeside yard

20×20 One-Car Garage

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot near a lake at sunset

20×20 Backyard Workshop

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

A 400 sq ft workshop fits a workbench wall, tool storage, mower parking, small woodworking equipment, and weekend project space without taking over the main garage.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $6,995
  • Wired Ready
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 backyard workshop.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. A 400 sq ft workshop fits a workbench wall, tool storage, mower parking, small woodworking equipment, and weekend project space without taking over the main garage.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

A 400 sq ft workshop fits a workbench wall, tool storage, mower parking, small woodworking equipment, and weekend project space without taking over the main garage.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 backyard workshop cost?

A 20×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 backyard workshop typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot near a lake at sunset

20×20 Backyard Workshop

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal shed with single-slope roof and open bays at an autumn sunset

20×20 Storage Shed

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×20 storage shed? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who outgrew a 20×20 plastic shed step up to an 20×20 metal shed for ride-on.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Double Roll-Up
  • 20-Yr Warranty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 storage shed.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 20×20 storage shed? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Looking for a 20×20 storage shed? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who outgrew a 20×20 plastic shed step up to an 20×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure. A double-roll-up on the gable end lets you back the mower in straight. Far cheaper than building a wood storage shed.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 storage shed cost?

A 20×20 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 storage shed?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 storage shed typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal shed with single-slope roof and open bays at an autumn sunset

20×20 Storage Shed

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Beige prefab metal building with long covered porch and attached garage below snowy mountains

20×20 Garage with Loft

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Garage with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday garage with loft space. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes.

You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered Loft
  • 14′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 garage with loft.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. 20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday garage with loft space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

Garage with Loft layout.

20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday garage with loft space. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open for the vehicle. Stamped drawings cover the loft load.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with loft
Everyday garage with loft
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with loft + seasonal storage
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 garage with loft cost?

A 20×20 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 garage with loft?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 garage with loft typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Beige prefab metal building with long covered porch and attached garage below snowy mountains

20×20 Garage with Loft

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

20×20 Home Office

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×20 home office? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 400 sq ft.

You’re viewing:Home Office·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Doors
  • Year-Round Use
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-HOME-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 home office.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 20×20 home office? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

Home Office layout.

Looking for a 20×20 home office? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 400 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house. Holds a desk, conference seating for four, and a printer credenza. Insulated metal panels keep it usable year-round in any climate zone.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday home office
Everyday home office
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office + seasonal storage
home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Home Office, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 home office cost?

A 20×20 home office from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 home office?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 home office.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 home office typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

20×20 Home Office

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

20×20 Hobby Room

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×20 hobby room? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 400 sq ft as a.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated
  • 12′ Legs Optional
  • Quiet Buildout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-HOBBY-ROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 hobby room.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 20×20 hobby room? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 20′ · 400 ground + loft

Hobby Room layout.

Looking for a 20×20 hobby room? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 400 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house. A 12 ft leg height fits ceiling-mounted antennas or a kiln vent. Insulation plus a window AC keeps the temperature stable.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room
Everyday hobby room
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room + seasonal storage
hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Hobby Room, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 hobby room cost?

A 20×20 hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 hobby room?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 hobby room typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

20×20 Hobby Room

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a hillside pasture

20×20 Tool Shed

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Tool Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Tool Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Tool Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Tool Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×20 tool shed fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • Slide Bolt Lock
  • Walk-In Door
  • 14 GA Standard
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-TOOL-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 tool shed.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 20×20 tool shed fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

Tool Shed layout.

Our 20×20 tool shed fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for project assembly. Lockable walk-in door keeps everything secure.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Tool Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed
Everyday tool shed
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed + seasonal storage
tool shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Tool Shed, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 tool shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Tool Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Tool Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 tool shed cost?

A 20×20 tool shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 tool shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 tool shed?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 tool shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 tool shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 tool shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 tool shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 tool shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 tool shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 tool shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 tool shed typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a hillside pasture

20×20 Tool Shed

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Hip roof prefab metal building in warm wood brown with glass panels and exercise bike

20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one.

You’re viewing:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • Hurricane Optional
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-MOWER-OUTDOOR-POBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft shop

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage layout.

Our 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds. Small property owners pick this layout to keep gasoline equipment out of the main garage and away from the house.

💡 Pro tip:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday mower & outdoor power storage
Everyday mower & outdoor power storage
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mower & outdoor power storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
mower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mower & Outdoor Power Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mower & Outdoor Power Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage cost?

A 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 mower & outdoor power storage typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Hip roof prefab metal building in warm wood brown with glass panels and exercise bike

20×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

20×20 Pool House

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Pool House, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 20×20 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Backyard pool owners convert 400 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Panels
  • Custom Color Match
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 pool house.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 20×20 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Our 20×20 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Backyard pool owners convert 400 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone. A wide French-door opening on the pool-facing side blurs indoor-outdoor. Insulated metal panels stay comfortable in summer heat.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Pool House, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 pool house cost?

A 20×20 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 pool house?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×20 pool house for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool house to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

20×20 Pool House

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Orange steel carport with open front sheltering a pickup and SUV on a farm

20×20 Carport Replacement

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Carport Replacement | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Carport Replacement
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Carport Replacement

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Carport Replacement, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×20 carport replacement packs 400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Existing 20×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed.

You’re viewing:Carport Replacement·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • Same Footprint
  • Full Enclosure
  • Upgrade Path
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-CARPORT-REPLACEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 carport replacement.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×20 carport replacement packs 400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

Carport Replacement layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×20 carport replacement packs 400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Existing 20×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead. Same footprint, same anchors in many cases, but four walls and a lockable door solve theft and weather problems for good. Trade-up pricing applies if your old frame still has life.

💡 Pro tip:Carport Replacement works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Carport Replacement in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport Replacement.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport Replacement spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport Replacement.

DAILY USEEveryday carport replacement
Everyday carport replacement
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport replacement.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport replacement + seasonal storage
carport replacement + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Carport Replacement, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 carport replacement is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport Replacement shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Carport Replacement buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Carport Replacement

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport Replacement · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport Replacement also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

20×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport Replacement questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 carport replacement cost?

A 20×20 carport replacement from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 carport replacement price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport replacement ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 carport replacement?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport replacement different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 carport replacement need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 carport replacement delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 carport replacement without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 carport replacement.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 carport replacement?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 carport replacement in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 carport replacement add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 carport replacement typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport Replacement quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Orange steel carport with open front sheltering a pickup and SUV on a farm

20×20 Carport Replacement

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel garage with two white roll-up doors and lean-to sheltering boat and ATVs

20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,900

12

20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,750$5,900SAVE $850
or $123/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×20Motorcycle & Toy Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Riders use 400 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Toy Garage·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×20
20×20
this size
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 400 sq ft enclosed
  • Reinforced Anchors
  • Walk-In Door
  • Theft Deterrent
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-MOTORCYCLE-TOY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 20′ · 400 sq ft

Motorcycle & Toy Garage layout.

Our 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Riders use 400 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor pattern keep your toys where you left them.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Toy Garage works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Toy Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & toy garage
Everyday motorcycle & toy garage
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & toy garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, what makes it different.

400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×20?

400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Toy Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Toy Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Toy Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×20

One-Car Garage

20×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 20×20

Backyard Workshop

20×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 20×20

Storage Shed

20×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×20

Garden Shed

20×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 20×20

Home Office

20×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 20×20

Hobby Room

20×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 20×20

Tool Shed

20×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 20×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

20×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 20×20

Pool House

20×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 20×20

Garage with Loft

20×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 20×20

Carport Replacement

20×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Toy Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage cost?

A 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×20 motorcycle & toy garage typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Toy Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel garage with two white roll-up doors and lean-to sheltering boat and ATVs

20×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with shuttered windows and roll-up door among autumn trees

20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,100

12

20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,100$7,100SAVE $1,000
or $148/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×24Single-Car Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×24 single-car metal garage packs 480 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 20×24.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Metal Garage·Size20×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,100$8,100Save $1,000
or as low as $148/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×24
20×24
this size
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 480 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X24-SINGLE-CAR-METALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×24 single-car metal garage.

20 feet wide × 24 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×24 single-car metal garage packs 480 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 24′ · 480 sq ft

Single-Car Metal Garage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×24 single-car metal garage packs 480 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 20×24 metal garage fits a full-size pickup or SUV with 4-5 feet of walk-around clearance and a workbench wall on one side. The 9-foot leg keeps the roll-up door at 20×24, clean fit for an F-150.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Metal Garage works well at 20×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
480 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space480 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car metal garage
Everyday single-car metal garage
480 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car metal garage + seasonal storage
single-car metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage, what makes it different.

480sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$148/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×24 single-car metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $148/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×24?

480 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 24′ footprint with 480 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,840–$5,760 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,160+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×24

Metal Workshop

20×24 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Storage Shed

20×24 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×24

Backyard Home Office

20×24 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×24

Pool House

20×24 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×24

ATV and Toy Storage

20×24 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Carport with Storage Bay

20×24 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×24

Small Business Storefront

20×24 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×24 single-car metal garage cost?

A 20×24 single-car metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $148/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×24 single-car metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×24 single-car metal garage?

Almost always for 480+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×24 single-car metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×24 single-car metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×24 single-car metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $148/month on a 20×24 single-car metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×24 single-car metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×24 single-car metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×24 single-car metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×24 single-car metal garage typically adds $3,840–$5,760 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with shuttered windows and roll-up door among autumn trees

20×24 Single-Car Metal Garage

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry door among mountain pines

20×24 Metal Workshop

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×24 Metal Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $7,100

12

20×24 Metal Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,100$7,100SAVE $1,000
or $148/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×24Metal Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×24 Metal Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

20×24 delivers 480 sq ft of everyday metal workshop space. Hobbyists building furniture, restoring bikes, or running a side trade pick the workshop config. 480 sq ft holds a 10-foot bench, table saw, drill press, and.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop·Size20×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,100$8,100Save $1,000
or as low as $148/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×24
20×24
this size
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 480 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X24-METAL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×24 metal workshop.

20 feet wide × 24 feet long. 20×24 delivers 480 sq ft of everyday metal workshop space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 24′ · 480 sq ft

Metal Workshop layout.

20×24 delivers 480 sq ft of everyday metal workshop space. Hobbyists building furniture, restoring bikes, or running a side trade pick the workshop config. 480 sq ft holds a 10-foot bench, table saw, drill press, and rolling tool chests with floor space left to swing 8-foot stock. Add a walk-in door and two 20×24 windows for natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop works well at 20×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×24 Metal Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
480 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space480 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop
Everyday metal workshop
480 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop + seasonal storage
metal workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×24 Metal Workshop, what makes it different.

480sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$148/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×24 metal workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $148/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×24?

480 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 24′ footprint with 480 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,840–$5,760 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×24 Metal Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×24 Metal Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,160+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×24 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×24

Storage Shed

20×24 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×24

Backyard Home Office

20×24 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×24

Pool House

20×24 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×24

ATV and Toy Storage

20×24 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Carport with Storage Bay

20×24 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×24

Small Business Storefront

20×24 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×24 metal workshop cost?

A 20×24 metal workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $148/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×24 metal workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×24 metal workshop?

Almost always for 480+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×24 metal workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×24 metal workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×24 metal workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $148/month on a 20×24 metal workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×24 metal workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×24 metal workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×24 metal workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×24 metal workshop typically adds $3,840–$5,760 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry door among mountain pines

20×24 Metal Workshop

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal shed with open front run-in shelter design on a fenced autumn pasture

20×24 Storage Shed

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×24 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $7,100

12

20×24 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,100$7,100SAVE $1,000
or $148/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×24Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×24 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

A 20×24 storage shed swallows a riding mower, push mower, snow blower, kayaks, bikes, and an entire wall of shelving with room left over. Small property owners and gardeners pick the 20×24 shed kit when a 20×24 ran out.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size20×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,100$8,100Save $1,000
or as low as $148/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×24
20×24
this size
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 480 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X24-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×24 storage shed.

20 feet wide × 24 feet long. A 20×24 storage shed swallows a riding mower, push mower, snow blower, kayaks, bikes, and an entire wall of shelving with room left over.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 24′ · 480 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

A 20×24 storage shed swallows a riding mower, push mower, snow blower, kayaks, bikes, and an entire wall of shelving with room left over. Small property owners and gardeners pick the 20×24 shed kit when a 20×24 ran out of space and they want one structure that handles every season.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 20×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×24 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
480 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space480 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
480 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×24 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

480sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$148/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×24 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $148/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×24?

480 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 24′ footprint with 480 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,840–$5,760 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×24 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×24 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,160+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×24 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×24

Metal Workshop

20×24 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Backyard Home Office

20×24 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×24

Pool House

20×24 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×24

ATV and Toy Storage

20×24 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Carport with Storage Bay

20×24 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×24

Small Business Storefront

20×24 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×24 storage shed cost?

A 20×24 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $7,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $148/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×24 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×24 storage shed?

Almost always for 480+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×24 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×24 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×24 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $148/month on a 20×24 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×24 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×24 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×24 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×24 storage shed typically adds $3,840–$5,760 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal shed with open front run-in shelter design on a fenced autumn pasture

20×24 Storage Shed

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

20×24 Backyard Home Office

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×24 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $7,100

12

20×24 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,100$7,100SAVE $1,000
or $148/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×24Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×24 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×24 backyard home office fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers buy a 20×24 prefab building when the spare bedroom won’t cut.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size20×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,100$8,100Save $1,000
or as low as $148/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×24
20×24
this size
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 480 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Panels
  • French Doors
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X24-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×24 backyard home office.

20 feet wide × 24 feet long. Our 20×24 backyard home office fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 24′ · 480 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

Our 20×24 backyard home office fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers buy a 20×24 prefab building when the spare bedroom won’t cut it. 480 square feet leaves room for a desk wall, conference seating for two clients, a printer cabinet, and a mini-split HVAC. Insulated panels and a French door make it feel like an actual office, not a shed.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 20×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×24 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
480 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width20′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space480 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
480 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×24 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

480sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$148/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×24 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $148/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×24?

480 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 24′ footprint with 480 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,840–$5,760 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×24 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×24 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,160+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 20×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×24 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×24

Metal Workshop

20×24 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Storage Shed

20×24 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×24

Pool House

20×24 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×24

ATV and Toy Storage

20×24 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Carport with Storage Bay

20×24 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×24

Small Business Storefront

20×24 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 20×24 backyard home office cost?

A 20×24 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $7,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $148/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×24 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×24 backyard home office?

Almost always for 480+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×24 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×24 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×24 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $148/month on a 20×24 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 20×24 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×24 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×24 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×24 backyard home office typically adds $3,840–$5,760 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

20×24 Backyard Home Office

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed | Steel and Stud, From $7,100

12

20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,100$7,100SAVE $1,000
or $148/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×24Hobby Room / She-Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed? At 480 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Crafters, quilters, and home-gym owners pick this build for a dedicated retreat away from.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room / She-Shed·Size20×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,100$8,100Save $1,000
or as low as $148/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×24
20×24
this size
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 480 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Skylights
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X24-HOBBY-ROOM-SHE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×24 hobby room / she-shed.

20 feet wide × 24 feet long. Looking for a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed? At 480 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 24′ · 480 ground + loft

Hobby Room / She-Shed layout.

Looking for a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed? At 480 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Crafters, quilters, and home-gym owners pick this build for a dedicated retreat away from the house. The 16-foot width fits a Peloton plus a yoga zone, or a long quilting table with two storage walls. Wainscoting and Barn Red trim turn the steel exterior into curb appeal, not eyesore.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room / She-Shed works well at 20×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room / She-Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
480 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room / She-Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space480 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room / She-Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room / she-shed
Everyday hobby room / she-shed
480 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room / she-shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
hobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed, what makes it different.

480sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$148/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×24 hobby room / she-shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $148/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×24?

480 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 24′ footprint with 480 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,840–$5,760 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room / She-Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room / She-Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,160+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room / She-Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×24 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×24

Metal Workshop

20×24 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Storage Shed

20×24 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×24

Backyard Home Office

20×24 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×24

Pool House

20×24 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×24

ATV and Toy Storage

20×24 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Carport with Storage Bay

20×24 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×24

Small Business Storefront

20×24 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room / She-Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed cost?

A 20×24 hobby room / she-shed from Steel and Stud starts at $7,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $148/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×24 hobby room / she-shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed?

Almost always for 480+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $148/month on a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×24 hobby room / she-shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×24 hobby room / she-shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×24 hobby room / she-shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×24 hobby room / she-shed typically adds $3,840–$5,760 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room / She-Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

20×24 Hobby Room / She-Shed

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit pool house at twilight with covered porch and lit sliding glass doors

20×24 Pool House

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×24 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $7,100

12

20×24 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,100$7,100SAVE $1,000
or $148/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×24Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×24 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×24 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Backyard pool owners use 20×24 buildings for a changing room, equipment closet, and.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size20×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,100$8,100Save $1,000
or as low as $148/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×24
20×24
this size
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 480 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Half Enclosure
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X24-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×24 pool house.

20 feet wide × 24 feet long. Our 20×24 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH20′ × 24′ · 480 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Our 20×24 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Backyard pool owners use 20×24 buildings for a changing room, equipment closet, and covered outdoor lounge in one structure. Half enclosure plus a 12-foot lean-to gives shaded patio space without permitting a separate cabana. Pewter Gray with White trim is the popular combo.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 20×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×24 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
480 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width20′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space480 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
480 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×24 Pool House, what makes it different.

480sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$148/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×24 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $148/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×24?

480 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 24′ footprint with 480 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,840–$5,760 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×24 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×24 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,160+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 20×24

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×24 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×24

Metal Workshop

20×24 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Storage Shed

20×24 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×24

Backyard Home Office

20×24 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×24

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×24 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🌾 20×24

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×24 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×24

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×24 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×24

ATV and Toy Storage

20×24 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×24

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×24 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×24

Carport with Storage Bay

20×24 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×24

Small Business Storefront

20×24 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 20×24 pool house cost?

A 20×24 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $7,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $148/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×24 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×24 pool house?

Almost always for 480+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×24 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×24 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×24 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $148/month on a 20×24 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 20×24 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×24 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×24 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×24 pool house typically adds $3,840–$5,760 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit pool house at twilight with covered porch and lit sliding glass doors

20×24 Pool House

480 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×24 steel building delivers 480 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart